200
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016 200
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
16UF-126-AD
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................115
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................315
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................451
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................553
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................597
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................673
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................679
10
INDEX .....................................................................691
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............12
▫ RKEKeyFob.........................13
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........15
▫ General Information ....................16
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................17
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs ..............18
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming .......19
▫ General Information ....................19
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ Rearming Of The System ................19
▫ To Arm The System ....................20
▫ To Disarm The System ..................20
▫ Tamper Alert .........................21
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........22
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................22
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........23
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................23
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................24
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk ...................25
2
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................25
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs ......26
▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement ..........26
▫ General Information ....................27
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................31
▫ Manual Door Locks ....................31
▫ Power Door Locks .....................33
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................35
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY ....37
▫ General Information ....................42
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................42
▫ Power Windows .......................42
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................45
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............46
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................47
▫ Trunk Emergency Release ................47
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........47
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............48
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................49
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........62
▫ Child Restraints .......................86
▫ Transporting Pets .....................107
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .107
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................108
▫ Transporting Passengers .................108
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................109
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................110
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................112
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and a Keyless Push Button
Ignition.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
(side opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the engine START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
RKE Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the RKE Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking
the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The RKE Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the RKE Key Fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in
the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob), a Key-
less Push Button Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE Key
Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow
the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key Fob is used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the
engine off in two seconds if the engine controller does not
receive the proper authorization codes from the body
control module.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A
blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been pro-
grammed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the LOCK
button on the interior power
door lock switch panel with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK
button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Key-
less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information).
• Place the ignition system out of the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
Key Fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
Manual Door Lock Switch
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob
buttons for all RKE Key Fob.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
RKE Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature
can be turned on or turned off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE Key Fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set-
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE Key
Fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash,
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE Key Fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC
button on the RKE Key Fob for at least
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is
activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC
button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Separating The RKE Key Fob Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) (RKE Key Fob) to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key
Fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Vehicle in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• RKE panic
button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
Cluster Display
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START
button on the
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, parking lights will flash, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine
will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote
Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the
ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-
minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable with a one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP
button
(vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
will display in the instrument cluster until you push the
START
button.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the RKE Key Fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the trunk.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock
switches is located on each of
the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or
unlock the doors and trunk.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you push the power door lock
switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the RKE
Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the RKE Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer per written request of the cus-
tomer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
Power Door Lock Switches
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to 0
MPH (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
rear edge of the door.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flat-
bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise ap-
proximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or
counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
by the stamped icons).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Lock Child Protection Door Lock
Unlock Child Protection Door Lock
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED
position), roll down the window, and open the door with
the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when the
door is unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: If “1st Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks All Doors”
is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the drivers door handle. To select between “ 1st
Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press
of RKE Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passen-
ger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press of RKE Key Fob
Unlocks All Doors” or “1st Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle.
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside the car and it
does not find any Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs outside
the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors a valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is detected
outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0
m) of the decklid, push the button located on the light bar
between the license plate lamps.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE Key Fob in the trunk and try to close the
decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Controls
1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Push the window
switch to the second
detent and release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch to the first detent and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Push the
switch to the second detent and release.
The window will go down automatically.
Manual Down
Push and hold the
switch to the first detent and
release when you want the window to stop.
Express Up
Lift the
switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go up automatically.
Manual Up
Lift the
switch to the first detent and release when
you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout
button (setting
it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout button
again (setting it in the UP position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the RKE Key Fob twice
within five seconds or by using the external release
switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang.
The release feature will function only when the vehicle is
in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in this
section for more information on trunk operation with the
Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Release Button
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Trunk Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And
Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Air Bag Features
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-
ployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power de-
ployment OR Full-
power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-
ployment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
senger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-
tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in-
strument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1-866-732-8243.
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol : 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH an-
chorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 17.7 inches (450 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center posi-
tion does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in an out-
board position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Tether Strap Anchorages
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a for-
ward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All head restraints may be re-
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
seat belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-
cupant Restraints” for further information.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................122
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................130
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........130
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped .........131
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped .........131
▫ Power Mirrors .......................132
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........133
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .133
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED..........................134
▫ Rear Cross Path.......................139
▫ Modes Of Operation ...................141
▫ General Information....................142
䡵 SEATS ..............................142
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............143
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped .............145
3
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........148
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......149
▫ Head Restraints ......................150
▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................153
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .155
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........155
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ...............156
▫ Memory Position Recall .................157
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................158
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........159
䡵 LIGHTS .............................161
▫ Headlight Switch .....................161
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......162
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............162
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................162
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .........................163
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....164
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................165
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............165
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................166
▫ Turn Signals .........................166
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................167
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................167
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................167
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ..............167
▫ Interior Lights .......................169
▫ Battery Saver Feature ..................171
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......172
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............172
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............173
▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............174
▫ Mist ...............................175
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........176
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .177
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................178
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................179
▫ To Activate ..........................180
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................181
▫ To Deactivate ........................181
▫ To Resume Speed .....................181
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............181
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............183
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................184
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .186
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .187
▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................187
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............189
▫ To Cancel ...........................189
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ ToTurnOff..........................190
▫ To Resume ..........................190
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............191
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......193
▫ Overtake Aid ........................197
▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................197
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......198
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........199
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......202
▫ General Information....................206
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode ........................207
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .......210
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................210
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............212
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .214
▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................214
▫ Service FCW Warning ..................215
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............215
▫ LaneSense Operation ...................215
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............216
▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............217
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............221
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................222
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................222
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............223
▫ ParkSense Display .....................223
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........229
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................229
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........230
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........230
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .................232
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................234
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............234
▫ ParkSense Display .....................235
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........245
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .246
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........247
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........247
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .........................249
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System.....................250
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................253
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display.....................262
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................273
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................276
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ..............277
▫ Sunglass Bin Door ....................278
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .279
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .281
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............282
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........284
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......285
▫ Using HomeLink .....................287
▫ Security ............................287
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................287
▫ General Information....................288
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........289
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........290
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............291
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........291
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................291
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............291
▫ Sunshade Operation....................292
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................292
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................292
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................292
▫ Relearn Procedure .....................292
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED .........................293
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............295
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........295
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............295
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........295
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............296
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ..........296
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .....296
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ...........296
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ......297
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................297
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................297
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................298
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................298
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED .........298
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........301
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................302
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................302
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders ..................303
䡵 STORAGE ............................304
▫ Glove Compartment ...................304
▫ Console Features .....................304
▫ Door Storage.........................308
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .309
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................309
▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear
Seat — If Equipped ....................309
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks ....................312
▫ Ski Pass-Through......................313
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............313
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................313
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-
main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-
tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
(Continued)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-
vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-
ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob or open any door. This LED
shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent to
the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirror Control
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE: The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
BSM Warning Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestri-
ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver’s seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-
ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Front Seat Adjustment
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
Seat Height Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or por-
table DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
Up, Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down posi-
tion) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
Rear Seat Release Loops
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
Driver Memory Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE Key Fob.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fob you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
To program your RKE Key Fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
Fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fob can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed
by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 2.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two levers must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety latch lever to the right.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/
DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pushing the lenses.
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pushed.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior
light operation after automatic battery protection is en-
abled (Lights OFF), either place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-
ing a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
operation of the windshield wipers the following mes-
sage will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):
⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Wind-
shield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation
to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain
good visibility of the road.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET-/Decel
2 — SET+/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
3 minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the
ACC system will be cancelled.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
•
When you override and push the SET + button or SET -
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds, the
ACC system will display a message that the system
will release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set-
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
braking capacity.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve-
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Function-
ality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).
LaneSense Warning Button
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
alization settings.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.)
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-
ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
ParkSense Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to RE-
VERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition,
the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking func-
tion by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-
ing with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-
mation.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicat-
ing the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
79-59 in
(200-
150 cm)
59-47 in
(150-
120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
No Tone/Solid Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
ParkSense Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or
rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected
within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or ⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
• pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• The Driver’s door is opened.
• The trunk is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper-
ate and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
• The gear position is in DRIVE.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• The Driver’s door is closed.
• The trunk is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen-
dicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular
parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Active ParkSense Searching Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backward
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Forward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is en-
abled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-
lel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Forward
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE-
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily dis-
played.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shift-
ing out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen
button personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
ParkView Camera Location
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen-
dently by pushing the lenses.
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pushed.
Sunglass Bin Door
The overhead console has a compartment which provides
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or
front mounted sunglass bin door.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-
sign. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
close.
Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink channels.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center
button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
(Continued)
HomeLink Indicator And Buttons
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there
is a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the
sunroof when the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To
reset the sunroof, follow these steps:
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switches are located to the right be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Shade Switches
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to
the full open position and automatically stop. (If the
sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will auto-
matically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening) open to the full open position and
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” pow-
ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob
and element must be used.
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
(Continued)
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of the center console storage bin, below the
media center. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles
will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.
Power Inverter Outlet
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow
driver/passenger comfort position.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
There is a front center console storage area located under
the center console cupholder.
• To access the front center console storage area push the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in
any position to maintain access to the storage area.
Center Console Armrest Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
Located inside the center console storage compartment is
a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.
Center Console Cupholder Release Front Center Console Storage
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line
may impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
Storage Compartment Fill Line Center Console Storage Passage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle
holder.
Front Center Console Pass-Through
Front Door Storage
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs
(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Grocery Bag Hooks
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, push
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........318
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........319
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......322
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......324
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............325
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............337
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............349
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............351
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............354
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................355
▫ Oil Change Reset .....................357
▫ Instrument Cluster Messages .............358
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............360
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........366
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....368
▫ Oil Change Reset .....................370
▫ Instrument Cluster Messages .............371
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............373
4
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........378
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................379
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................381
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................383
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............383
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN
Settings.............................383
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......400
䡵 USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED . .400
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................401
▫ Radio Operation ......................402
▫ Media Mode .........................402
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .402
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information .........402
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................404
▫ Manual Climate Controls ................404
▫ Manual Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped ..............409
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped ..............414
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............421
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......422
▫ Operating Tips .......................424
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............427
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................428
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................428
▫ Get Started ..........................429
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................431
▫ Radio ..............................432
▫ Media..............................434
▫ Phone..............................435
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................437
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................438
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................439
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ............440
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................441
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................441
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............442
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............444
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) .....................445
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN).........447
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............447
▫ Do Not Disturb ......................448
▫ General Information....................448
▫ Additional Information .................449
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio Screen 11 — Steering Wheel
2 — EVIC/DID Controls 7 — Passenger Air Bag 12 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Cruise Controls 9 — Radio Controls
5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Climate Controls
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
Base Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Premium Driver Information Display (DID) Instrument Cluster
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Driver Information Display (DID)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to
cool whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there a single chime will sound.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-
nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle.”
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-
formation.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged and the target vehicle
is detected. Refer to ⬙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is engaged. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further in-
formation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
display is located in the instrument cluster.
The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items ( Speed-
ometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up,
Settings).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Messages,
Screen Set Up, Settings).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFTarrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Controls
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
The Oil Life can also be reset through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The EVIC And Holding OK
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life.
5. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted
in the EVIC.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC
information display. Push and release the RIGHT
ar-
row button to toggle between MPH and km/h and push
the OK button to select your speedometer display.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC
information display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed.
Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push the OK
button to select or reset the following resettable sub-
menus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC infor-
mation display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow
button and one of the following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT
arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
the EVIC information display.
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold OK button to reset average fuel economy infor-
mation.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Toggle the LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC informa-
tion display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC infor-
mation display. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT
ar-
row button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC
information display. Push and release the OK button
to enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Vehicle Settings (EVIC) — If Equipped
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
1 Language
Select
Language English, Spanish,
French
2 Units Select Units U.S., Metric
3 FCW
Sensitivity
FCW
Sensitivity
Near, Far
4 ParkSense ParkSense Off, Sound Only,
Sound & Display
5 Blind Spot
Alert
Blind Spot
Alert
Off, Lights Only,
Lights & Chime
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
6 Hill Start
Assist
Hill Start
Asst
On, Off
7 Auto Lock
Doors
Auto Lock
Doors
On, Off
8 Auto
Unlock
Doors
Auto Unlock
Doors
On, Off
9 Passive
Entry
Passive Entry On, Off
10 Remote
Unlock
Sequence
Remote
Unlock
Driver Door, All
Doors
11 Key Fob
Linked to
Memory
Key in
Memory
On, Off
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
12 Remote
Start
Comfort
System
Rmt Start
Comfort
Off, Remote
Starts Only, All
Starts
13 Sound Horn
with
Remote
Start
Horn w/
Rmt Start
On, Off
14 Sound Horn
with
Remote
Lock
Horn w/
Rmt Lock
Off, 1st Press,
2nd Press
15 Flash Lights
with Lock
Lights w/
Lock
On, Off
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
16 Daytime
Running
Lights
Daytime
Lights
On, Off
17 Automatic
Highbeams
Auto
Highbeams
On, Off
18 Headlights
On with
Wipers
Lights w/
Wipers
On, Off
19 Rain
Sensing
Wipers
Auto Wipers On, Off
20 Headlights
Off Delay
Lights Off
Delay
0 seconds, 30
seconds, 60
seconds, 90
seconds
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
21 Key-Off
Power
Delay
Power Off
Delay
Off, 45 seconds,
5 minutes, 10
minutes
22 Illuminated
Approach
Lights w/
Unlock
0 seconds, 30
seconds, 60
seconds, 90
seconds
23 Easy Exit
Seat
Easy Exit
Seat
On, Off
24 Tilt Mirror
in Reverse
Tilt Mirror in
R
On, Off
25 Compass
variance
Compass Var See Owner’s
Manual, X
Increment
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Settings
Translation
Message
Submenu
26 Calibrate
Compass
Compass Cal Push > to
calibrate the
compass
27 Brake
Service
Brake Service Follow the VF
specifically for
this one
28 Auto Park
Brake
Auto Park
Brake
On, Off
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
1. Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
2. Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy
L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for
Compass and Outside Temp are not available
3. Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average Economy
• Current Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio Information
• Menu Title (default)
• Digital Speedo
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,
Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)
• Restore
• Cancel
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID)
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Messages,
Screen Setup).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Mes-
sages, Screen Setup).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
DID Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Oil Life can also be reset through the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) screen.
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info.”
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life.
5. Push and release the UP
arrow button to exit the
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is high-
lighted in the DID.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the informa-
tion display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow
button to toggle between km/h and MPH and push
the OK button to select your speedometer display.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the infor-
mation display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow
button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the
LEFT
or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through
the information submenus and push the OK button to
select or reset the following resettable submenus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN
arrow button
until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the information
display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
and one of the following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT
arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the information display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the information
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
LaneSense Menu — If Equipped
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
the information display.
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis-
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the infor-
mation display (Toggle LEFT
or RIGHT arrow
button to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the Information
Display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Messages Menu displays in the DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning mes-
sages. Pushing the RIGHT
arrow button will allow
you to see what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
1. Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp. (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
2. Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (Default)
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy
L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for
Compass and Outside Temp are not available
3. Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Information
• Menu Title (Default )
• Digital Speedo
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• On (Default)
• Off
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (Default)
• Range
7. Defaults
• Restore
• Cancel
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons are located below the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e. 30, 60, 90) push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e. ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn
the screen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings
Uconnect 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on
the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the
touchscreen. The remaining settings are defined for the
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access pro-
grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
play, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if
equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data (if
equipped).
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
This feature allows you to select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status, press and release the
Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights On
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of the languages for
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Units
This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of
measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation
system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the
“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster dis-
play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within
a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the
“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Voice
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for
advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more
comprehensive responses for new users) button on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Set Time Hours
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
• Time Format
This feature allows you to select the time format display
setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touch-
screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or
24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If
Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW
is on.
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to
provide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning
zone start point.
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• ParkSense — If Equipped
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status,
press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound
and Display.”
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-
mation.
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Front ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the
EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
Rear ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the
EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime
volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en-
abled when ParkSense is also on).
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Braking Assist” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func-
tion and operating information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights
category. When this category is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
category is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
“Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermit-
tent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sys-
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers,
rotors, etc.).
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
• Auto Park Brake
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle
is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)
• Hill Start Assist
This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill
and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your desired
time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled,
by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho-
rized dealer for further information.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Sound Horn With Remote
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Select one of three
options to sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UN-
LOCK button. You must press the RKE Key Fob UN-
LOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE Key Fob).
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver
Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver
Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented
Seat & Steering Wheel
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented
seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on
when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented
seat will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,”
“Remote Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a
check-mark appears next to the setting option. Select
“Off,” “Remote Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine
when the feature is activated.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to
adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
• AUX Volume Match
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an external device, to be connected to
the audio system.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
USB Port and AUX Jack
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/
SXM/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which audio mode you
are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
while in mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-
ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control 5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
2 — Front Blower Control 6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
7 — MODE Control
4 — Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
operating.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is recircu-
lated. A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the con-
denser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in
any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between
the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The
warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives
improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE:
• If the RECIRCULATION
button is pushed when
the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
button.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when ON.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode
is turned off the climate system will return the previous
setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreens as
follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
7. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-
screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped
Buttons On Your Faceplate
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
The buttons on your faceplate are also accessible on the
Uconnect system touchscreen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on your faceplate or the buttons on your touch-
screen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On Your Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clock-
wise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob counter-
clockwise.
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your
touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either
button is selected. Push either button on your touch-
screen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn
off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air
into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button
on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 5.0
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com.
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
hones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Additional Information
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................455
▫ Normal Starting.......................455
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................456
▫ Extended Park Starting..................456
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................457
▫ After Starting ........................458
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .458
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............459
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............461
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .461
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........461
▫ Gear Ranges .........................463
䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .....469
▫ Operation ..........................470
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .472
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........472
▫ Acceleration .........................472
▫ Traction ............................473
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............473
5
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................474
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................474
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................475
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ............476
▫ Auto Park Brake ......................481
▫ SafeHold............................481
▫ Brake Service Mode ...................481
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................483
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .483
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .483
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............484
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............484
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light............486
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............486
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................487
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............490
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........490
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...........495
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............495
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS)................496
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) ...........496
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............497
▫ Tire Markings ........................497
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........501
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........502
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........504
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........509
▫ Tire Pressure ........................509
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................511
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .512
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................513
▫ Tire Types ...........................513
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............515
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............515
▫ Tire Spinning ........................518
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................518
▫ Life Of Tire .........................519
▫ Replacement Tires .....................520
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......522
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....523
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .524
▫ Base System .........................527
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........530
▫ General Information....................533
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................534
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................534
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............535
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......536
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................536
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................537
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................537
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............538
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED ...........539
▫ E-85 General Information ...............539
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................539
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................540
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .......540
▫ Starting ............................541
▫ Cruising Range .......................541
▫ Replacement Parts ....................541
▫ Maintenance ........................542
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................542
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............545
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................546
▫ Certification Label ....................546
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................548
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................549
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .549
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models .......................550
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) Models .......................551
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Ex-
tended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel;
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it
2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds.
3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.
4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
er’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to
access the L or S position. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this sec-
tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA US’s current and future lineup of
FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined
to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combi-
nations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Standard Shifter
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual
shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
be completed.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Transmission Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section for further informa-
tion) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-
age due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn-
ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
LOW (L) — If Equipped
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi-
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving and many other situations.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the nine
available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this
will activate a temporary Paddle Shift mode. The trans-
mission will revert back to normal operation after a
period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.
When the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT
position, tapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙perma-
nent⬙ Paddle Shift mode. The transmission will remain in
Paddle Shift mode until the driver deliberately disables
Paddle Shift (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
automatic operation.
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
when maximum engine speed is reached (except the
transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd
gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,
the transmission will upshift only when commanded
by the driver.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, push and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle
Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more con-
venient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
Electric Park Brake Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch if OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in the applied
position or 90 seconds in the released position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-
gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-
ing brake is engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled,
and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch down momen-
tarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The park brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by holding the EPB switch in the release position while
the transmission is being placed into PARK. This bypass
can be reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again,
or by driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20 km/h),
or by going to the personal setting menu and turning the
Auto Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis-
sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safe-
Hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through EVIC
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID) or the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-
play (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC off”
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use
of a snow traction device with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
Tire Rotation
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full
Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on
upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information
Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color.
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a
⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide op-
timum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine
to start under cold conditions, may affect drivability,
and could cause engine damage.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
ignition LOCK/OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
Push To Open
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Remove the fuel filler cap (gas cap) and hang by tether
hook on fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door around the entire perimeter to break the ice
buildup and re-open the door.
Fuel Filler Door
1— Tether Hook
Fuel Filler Door And Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1— Tether Hook
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
6. Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door
will close.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Push To Close
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de-
tails.
• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, refer to “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Remove the Key Fob.
12. Release the brake pedal.
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........555
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............555
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................556
▫ Torque Specifications ...................557
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........558
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................559
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .560
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........561
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........563
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........569
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........570
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................571
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................572
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................580
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........583
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............584
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................585
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............587
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................589
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank below the radio screen.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit.
Pull Strap
Tire Service Kit Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
4. Remove Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and turn Off the
ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment.”
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access
the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
Pull Strap
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and
wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shifter into the park position.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
1. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and wheel chocks
from the spare wheel as an assembly. Remove the
chocks from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Jacking Locations
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if chang-
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
3. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
4. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
5. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire.
Front Body Flange
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
Rear Body Flange Front Body Flange Engaged
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, center-
ing the jack saddle between the locating notches on the
sill flange.
7. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Rear Body Flange Engaged
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
8. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
9. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
10. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
12. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
13. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow
the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is under-
neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console
pass-through.
Manual Park Release location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,
and use it to pull the lever upwards.
4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward,
until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual
Park Release lever is locked in the released position.
Manual Park Release Cover Manual Park Release Tether
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To reset the Manual Park Release:
1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
Locked Position
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is en-
gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
Front Of Vehicle Recovery Points
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
pushing the EPB switch down.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
hicle Limited Warranty.
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........599
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........600
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .601
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................601
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............602
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............603
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................604
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................604
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........605
▫ Engine Oil ..........................606
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................609
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................610
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............610
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............612
▫ Body Lubrication .....................615
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............616
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................616
▫ Exhaust System ......................617
7
▫ Cooling System ......................620
▫ Brake System ........................626
▫ Automatic Transmission ................627
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................629
䡵 FUSES ..............................637
▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) ..........638
▫ Interior Fuses ........................651
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................652
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................653
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................655
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps .....655
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp ................658
▫ Front Side Marker Lamps ...............660
▫ Front Fog Lamp ......................661
▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) ...........662
▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) ..............664
▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp .............665
▫ License Plate Lamp ....................666
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................667
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................668
▫ Engine .............................668
▫ Chassis ............................671
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
(Continued)
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover, by
inserting fingers between bottom of side panel (at
rear) and the carpet. Pull outboard to disengage the 3
clips.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
Console Closeout Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
3. Carefully remove 3 push pins holding the hush panel
and remove the part.
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top bottom of the door and lift the tab at the top of the
door to release the cover then rotate remove the door
out and lift up.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position flow
direction indicators.
Hush Panel
Air Filter Cover Location
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
A/C Air Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
WARNING! (Continued)
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed
on the inside of the cover.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – – Not Used
F08 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Fuel Inj.
Power Distribution Center
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F09 – – Not Used
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) – If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
F13 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module
(ECM)/VSM (Engine
Stop/Start Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Mod-
ule (DTCM)/Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) – If
Equipped/RDM/Brake
System Module (BSM)/
Brake Pedal Switch/EPB
(Electric Park Brake)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F15 – – Not Used
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coil
F17 – – Not Used
F18 – – Not Used
F19 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 – 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan Enable
F23 – 70 Amp Tan Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 2
F23 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) #2 – If Equipped
With Engine Stop/Start
Option
F24 – – Not Used
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F25B – 20 Amp Yellow Front Washer Pump – If
Equipped with Engine
Stop/Start Option
F26 – – Not Used
F27 – – Not Used
F28 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module
(ECM)/EPS/Fuel Pump
Relay Feed
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan PWM Con-
troller
F38 – – Not Used
F39 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) #1 – If Equipped
With Engine Stop/Start
Option
F41 60 Amp Yellow – Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 1
F42 – – Not Used
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F44 – – Not Used
F45 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
(PDM) – If Equipped
F46 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof – If Equipped
F47 – – Not Used
F48 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
(DDM)
F49 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter (115V
A/C) – If Equipped
F50 30 Amp Pink – Windshield Wiper Smart
Motor (WWSM)
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – – Not Used
F53 30 Amp Pink – Brake System Module
BSM & Valves
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F54 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 3
F55 – 10 Amp Red Blind Spot Sensors/
Compass/Rearview Cam-
era – If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/RF Hub
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification
Module/Voltage Stability
Module (VSM) #2 – If
Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
F59 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Mod-
ule (DTCM)
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet – Center
Console
F61 – – Not Used
F62 – – Not Used
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
F64 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Steering Wheel –
If Equipped
F65 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)/Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
F67 – 10 Amp Red In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – 10 Amp Red Gear Shift Module
(GSM)/Active Grill Shut-
ter (AGS). – If Equipped/
EPB SW
F70 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) – If Equipped with
Engine Stop/Start Option
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Right – If
Equipped with Engine
Stop/Start Option
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
F73 – – Not Used
F74 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster/Defogger
F75 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F76 – 10 Amp Red Drivers Window SW– If
Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port/Brake Pedal
Switch
F78 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port/Steering
Column Control Module
(SCCM)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F79 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
(ICS)/Switch Bank/
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)/EPB SW
F80 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
(ECM)
F84 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB)
– Left
F85 – – Not Used
F86 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns – If Equipped With
Engine Stop/Start Option
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F87A – 20 Amp Yellow HID Headlamp Left – If
Equipped Engine Stop/
Start Option
F88 – 10 Amp Red Collision Mitigation Mod-
ule (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Haptic Lane Feedback
Module (Half)/Humidity
Sensor– If Equipped
F89 – – Not Used
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – – Not Used
F92 – – Not Used
F93 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module
(BSM) – Pump Motor – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F94 30 Amp Pink – Electric Park Brake (EPB)
– Right
F95 – 10 Amp Red Electrochromatic Mirror/
Rain/Pass. Window SW/
Power Outlet Console
Illumination/Sensor/
Sunroof – If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier – If
Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-
partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-
ment panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp A6220
Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Bi-Halogen Headlamp 9005HL+
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24W SV
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21W
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 921
License Lamp W5W
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the top pushpin on the headlamp access door
in the wheel liner to access the headlamp assembly.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
Access Door
Headlamp Bulb Cap
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-
ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing all push pins
and lifting beauty cover.
3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Beauty Cover
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.
9. Install beauty cover.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,
and peel down the lower closeout.
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
front fog lamp housing.
Lower Closeout
Front Fog Lamp Socket
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
with the three fasteners.
Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk
lid handle.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
Backup Lamp Socket
7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
Inner Deck Panel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
NOTE: Passenger side is shown. The driver’s side is
similar.
Backup Lamp Socket
5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasp-
ing the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the
tail lamp housing bolts.
3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts
Tail Lamp Beauty Cover
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dis-
lodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.
5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7.
Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
License Plate Lamp
1.
Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
remove.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
Tail Lamp Bolts
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
8.7 Quarts 8.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
674 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 675
Maintenance Chart
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
678 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................681
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............681
▫ Prepare A List ........................681
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............681
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............681
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............682
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........682
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................683
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........683
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............683
▫ Service Contract ......................683
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............685
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................685
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............685
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................685
▫ In Canada...........................685
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............686
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 681
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
686 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 687
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................483
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .184
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............622
Additives, Fuel ...........................537
Adjust
Down ...............................143
Forward ..............................143
Rearward .............................143
Up .................................143
AirBag.................................62
Advance Front Air Bag .................62, 64
Air Bag Operation .......................65
Air Bag Warning Light ..................66, 82
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................75
Enhanced Accident Response ................82
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................85
FrontAirBag ........................62, 66
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag ...............75
If A Deployment Occurs ...................80
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................75
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............84
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............84
Side Air Bags ...........................75
Transporting Pets .......................107
Air Bag Deployment ........................62
Air Bag Light ......................82, 110, 326
Air Bag Maintenance .......................84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .610
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................612
Air Conditioning ......................404, 409
Air Conditioning Controls................404, 409
Air Conditioning Filter ..................425, 613
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........424, 426
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................612
Air Conditioning System ..........404, 409, 422, 612
Air Filter ...............................610
Air Pressure, Tires .........................511
692 INDEX
Alarm
Arm The System ........................20
Disarm The System .......................20
Rearming The System .....................19
Tamper Alert ...........................21
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................19
Alarm, Panic .............................25
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................329
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................472
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............621, 667
Disposal ..............................624
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................484
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................344
Appearance Care .........................629
Assist, Hill Start ..........................487
Auto Down Power Windows ..................43
Automatic Door Locks ......................34
Automatic Headlights ......................162
Automatic High Beams .....................163
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........422
Automatic Transaxle .......................459
Automatic Transmission .................461, 629
Adding Fluid .......................629, 671
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................629
Fluid Change ..........................629
Fluid Level Check ...................627, 628
Fluid Type .........................627, 671
Special Additives .......................628
Autostick ...............................469
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................34
Auto Up Power Windows ....................44
Axle Lubrication ..........................671
Battery .............................331, 610
Charging System Light ...................331
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........26
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
10
INDEX 693
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............26
Belts, Seat...............................110
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................615
B-Pillar Location ..........................504
Brake Assist System .......................486
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............483
Brake Fluid .............................671
Brake System .........................483, 626
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................483
Fluid Check ........................626, 671
Master Cylinder ........................626
Warning Light .........................327
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................461
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................170
Bulb Replacement ..................653, 655, 660
Bulbs, Light.......................112,653, 660
Camera, Rear ............................273
Capacities, Fluid ..........................667
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................542
Oil (Engine) ....................599, 600, 608
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................623
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............109, 538
Cargo Area Features .......................309
Cargo Compartment .......................309
Car Washes .............................630
Certification Label.........................546
Chains, Tire .............................522
Changing A Flat Tire .......................569
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................498
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .603
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............108
Checks, Safety ...........................108
Child Restraint ............................86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................91
Center Seat LATCH ......................99
694 INDEX
Child Restraints .........................86
Child Seat Installation .................102, 104
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......100
Infants And Child Restraints ................89
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt .................................102
LATCH Positions ........................94
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......93
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........89
Seating Positions ........................92
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............105
Child Safety Locks .........................35
Clean Air Gasoline ........................534
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................632
Climate Control ..........................404
Coin Holder .............................304
Cold Weather Operation ....................456
Compact Spare Tire........................516
Console, Floor ...........................304
Console, Overhead ........................276
Contract, Service ..........................683
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........623
Cooling System...........................620
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............622
Coolant Capacity .......................667
Coolant Level ..........................624
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................624
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................621
Inspection .........................620, 624
Points To Remember .....................625
Pressure Cap ..........................623
Radiator Cap ..........................623
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......621, 667, 668
Corrosion Protection .......................629
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............184, 375
10
INDEX 695
Cruise Light ......................351, 352, 353
Cupholders .............................302
Customer Assistance .......................681
Data Recorder, Event .......................85
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............171
Daytime Running Lights ....................164
Dealer Service............................604
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................47
Deck Lid, Power Release .....................46
Defroster, Rear Window.....................313
Defroster, Windshield ...................111,407
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................601
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................167
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................606
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................592
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................624
Door Ajar...............................336
Door Ajar Light ..........................336
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......35
Door Locks ..........................24, 31
KeyFob ............................31, 33
Key Fob Emergency Key ................26, 35
Manual Door Locks ......................31
Power Door Locks .......................33
Remote ...............................31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............31, 33
Door Locks, Automatic ......................34
Door Opener, Garage.......................279
Driver Information Display (DID)
Controls ..............................368
Display ..............................368
Driver Information Display (DID) ............368
Instrument Cluster ......................368
Messages .............................371
696 INDEX
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................146
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................473
E-85 Fuel ...............................539
Electrical Power Outlets.....................298
Electric Parking Brake ......................476
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................313
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................132
Electronic Brake Control System ...............483
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................484
Traction Control System ...................490
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....179, 184
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............490
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........333
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......273
Change Engine Oil ......................357
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .355
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu ...........................355
EVIC Display ..........................355
EVIC Messages .........................358
Selectable Menu Items ....................360
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................47
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................555
Jacking ...............................569
Jump Starting ..........................583
Overheating ...........................555
Towing ..............................592
Emergency Trunk Release ....................47
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........603
Engine..............................599, 600
Air Cleaner ...........................610
Block Heater ..........................458
Break-In Recommendations ................107
Checking Oil Level ......................606
10
INDEX 697
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................668
Cooling ..............................620
Exhaust Gas Caution .................109, 538
Fails To Start ..........................457
Flooded, Starting .......................457
Fuel Requirements ......................534
Jump Starting ..........................583
Oil...........................606, 667, 668
Oil Filler Cap ...................599, 600, 608
Oil Filter .............................609
Oil Selection .......................607, 667
Oil Synthetic ..........................609
Overheating ...........................555
Starting ..............................455
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................608
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................608
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............82
Entry System, Illuminated ....................22
Ethanol .............................535, 539
Event Data Recorder ........................85
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................109, 538
Exhaust System .......................109, 617
Exterior Lighting ......................161, 660
Exterior Lights ........................112,660
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................610
Air Conditioning ....................425, 613
Engine Oil .........................609, 668
Engine Oil Disposal .....................609
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................555
Turn Signal ..................112,166, 350, 658
Flash-To-Pass ............................167
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................541
Engine Oil ............................540
Fuel Requirements ...................539, 540
698 INDEX
Maintenance ...........................542
Replacement Parts .......................541
Starting ..............................541
Flooded Engine Starting ....................457
Floor Console ............................304
Fluid, Brake .............................671
Fluid Capacities ..........................667
Fluid Leaks .............................113
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................626
Engine Oil ............................606
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........668
Fog Lights ...........................165, 661
Fog Light Service .........................661
Folding Rear Seat .........................153
Forward Collision Warning ..................210
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................587
Front Position Light .......................660
Fuel...................................534
Additives .............................537
Clean Air .............................534
Ethanol ...........................535, 539
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................542
Gasoline ..............................534
Light ................................344
Materials Added ........................537
Methanol .............................535
Octane Rating ......................534, 668
Requirements ..........................534
Specifications ..........................668
Tank Capacity ..........................667
Fuel, Flexible ............................539
Fuses ..................................637
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........279, 287
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................542
Gasoline,
Clean Air ........................534
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................534
10
INDEX 699
Gear Ranges .............................463
Glass Cleaning ...........................635
GVWR .................................546
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................473
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................555
Headlights
Automatic ............................162
Bulb Replacement .......................656
Cleaning .............................635
Delay ................................162
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........167
Lights On Reminder .....................165
On With Wipers ........................162
Passing ..............................167
Replacing .........................655, 656
Switch ...............................161
Time Delay ............................162
Head Restraints ..........................150
Head Rests..............................150
Heated Mirrors ...........................133
Heater..............................404, 409
Heater, Engine Block .......................458
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .167
Hill Start Assist...........................487
Holder, Coin.............................304
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............279
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................22
Courtesy Lights .........................22
Front Courtesy Overhead Console ............22
Illuminated Entry ........................22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter .......22
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................122
700 INDEX
Instrument Cluster ........319, 322, 330, 335, 346, 350
Instrument Cluster ...................357, 370
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............318
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............636
Interior Appearance Care....................634
Interior Fuses ............................651
Interior Lights ...........................169
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............173
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................301
Jacking Instructions........................572
Jack Location ............................570
Jack Operation ........................569, 572
Jump Starting ............................583
Key Fob
Emergency Key .........................13
Lock The Doors .........................24
Panic Alarm ............................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......19, 26
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............13, 23
Unlatch The Trunk .......................25
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Key-In Reminder ..........................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................37
Enter The Trunk ......................25, 37
KeyFob...............................37
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ................24, 37
Passive Entry ...........................37
Passive Entry Programming .................37
Remote Control .........................37
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ............23, 37
Unlock From The Passenger Side ..........23, 37
Keyless Entry System .......................23
Keyless Go...............................12
10
INDEX 701
Keys ...................................12
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............166
Lane Change Assist........................167
LaneSense ..............................215
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................51
Latches ................................113
Lead Free Gasoline ........................534
Leaks, Fluid .............................113
Life Of Tires .............................519
Light Bulbs .......................112,653, 660
Light Replacement .....................653, 660
Lights ...........................112,161, 653
AirBag ........................82, 110, 326
Automatic Headlights ....................162
Battery Saver ..........................171
Brake Assist Warning ....................494
Brake Warning .........................327
Bulb Replacement ....................655, 660
Cruise ........................351, 352, 353
Daytime Running .......................164
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............166, 167
Engine Temperature Warning ...............330
Exterior ...........................112,660
Fog..............................165, 661
Front Replacement ......................660
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................555
Headlights .........................161, 656
Headlights On Reminder ..................165
Headlights On With Wipers ................162
Headlight Switch .......................161
High Beam ............................167
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............167
Illuminated Entry ........................22
Instrument Cluster ......................161
Intensity Control ........................170
Interior ..............................169
License ..............................666
702 INDEX
Lights On Reminder .....................165
Low Fuel .............................344
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........337
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........171
Park ................................349
Passing ..............................167
Reading ...........................167, 277
Seat Belt Reminder ......................325
Security Alarm .........................329
Service ...............................655
Side Marker ........................658, 660
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........341, 524
Traction Control ........................494
Turn Signal ..................112,166, 350, 658
Vanity Mirror ..........................133
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .330, 350
Loading Vehicle ..........................546
Tires ................................504
Locks ..................................31
Automatic Door .........................34
Auto Unlock ...........................34
Child Protection .........................35
Door .................................31
Power Door ............................33
Low Tire Pressure System ...................524
Lubrication, Body .........................615
Lug Nuts ...............................556
Maintenance Free Battery....................610
Maintenance Procedures ....................605
Maintenance Schedule ......................674
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .337, 603
Manual, Service ..........................686
Marker Lights, Side........................658
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................626
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............155
Memory Seat ............................155
Memory Seats And Radio ...................155
10
INDEX 703
Methanol ...............................535
Mirrors ................................122
Electric Powered ........................132
Electric Remote .........................132
Exterior Folding ........................130
Heated ...............................133
Outside ..............................130
Rearview .............................122
Vanity ...............................133
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................524
MOPAR Parts.........................604, 685
MTBE/ETBE ............................535
Multi-Function Control Lever .................166
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................107
Occupant Restraints ........................47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............534, 668
Oil, Engine ..........................606, 668
Capacity .............................667
Change Interval ........................607
Checking .............................606
Dipstick ..............................606
Disposal ..............................609
Filter .............................609, 668
Filter Disposal .........................609
Identification Logo ......................607
Materials Added To ......................609
Pressure Warning Light ...................332
Recommendation ....................607, 667
Synthetic .............................609
Viscosity ..........................608, 667
Oil Filter, Change .........................609
Oil Filter, Selection ........................609
Oil Pressure Light .........................332
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................601
Opener
, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............279
704 INDEX
Operating Precautions ......................601
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................130
Overhead Console.........................276
Overheating, Engine .......................555
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,686
Paint Care ..............................629
Panic Alarm ..............................25
Parking Brake............................476
ParkSense System, Rear..................222, 232
Passing Light ............................167
Personalized Menu Bar .....................427
Pets ...................................107
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........505
Power
Brakes ...............................483
Deck Lid Release ........................46
Door Locks ............................33
Mirrors ..............................132
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........298, 301
Sunroof ...........................289, 293
Windows ..............................42
Power Seats
Down ...............................143
Forward ..............................143
Rearward .............................143
Up .................................143
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............58
Preparation For Jacking .....................571
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................59
Radial Ply Tires ..........................513
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........623
Radio Frequency
General Information ............16, 19, 27, 31, 42
Radio Operation ..........................402
10
INDEX 705
Radio Remote Controls .....................401
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................400
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................176
Rear Camera ............................273
Rear Cupholder ..........................303
Rear ParkSense System ..................222, 232
Rear Seat, Folding .........................153
Rear Window Defroster .....................313
Rear Window Features .....................313
Recorder, Event Data .......................85
Recreational Towing .......................549
Reformulated Gasoline .....................534
Refrigerant ..............................612
Reminder, Lights On .......................165
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................49
Remote Control
Starting System .........................28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Lock The Doors .........................24
Panic Alarm ............................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......19, 26
Remote Battery Replacement ................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..............13, 23
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............26
Unlatch The Trunk .......................25
Unlock The Doors .......................23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........401
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode ..................30
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message ............29
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................30
How To Use Remote Start ..................28
Remote Starting System ...................28
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................30
Remote Starting System......................28
Remote Trunk Release.......................46
706 INDEX
Replacement Bulbs ........................653
Replacement Parts.........................604
Replacement Tires .........................520
Reporting Safety Defects ....................685
Restraint, Head...........................150
Restraints, Child...........................86
Restraints, Occupant ........................47
Rotation, Tires ...........................523
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................110
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................112
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................685
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................109
Safety Information, Tire .....................497
Safety Tips ..............................108
Schedule, Maintenance .....................674
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......56
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........59
Energy Management Feature ................59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................54
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............56
Pregnant Women ........................58
Seat Belt Extender .......................57
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................59
Seat Belt Reminder .......................49
Seat Belt System .........................47
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................636
Seat Belt Reminder .........................49
Seat Belts.............................49, 110
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................56
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........56
Child Restraint ..........................86
Extender ..............................57
Front Seat ........................49, 51, 54
Inspection ............................110
Operating Instructions ....................54
10
INDEX 707
Pregnant Women ........................58
Pretensioners ...........................59
Rear Seat ..............................51
Reminder .............................325
Untwisting Procedure .....................56
Seats............................142, 143, 148
Adjustment .....................142, 143, 145
Easy Entry ............................158
Head Restraints ........................150
Heated ...............................148
Memory ..............................155
Rear Folding ..........................153
Seatback Release ........................146
Tilting ...............................146
Vented ...............................149
Ventilated .............................149
Security Alarm ...........................329
Arm The System ........................20
Disarm The System .......................20
Rearming The System .....................19
Security Alarm ..........................19
Tamper Alert ...........................21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............668
SENTRY KEY
Immobilizer ............................17
Key Programming .......................19
Replacement Keys .......................18
Service Assistance .........................681
Service Contract ..........................683
Service Manuals ..........................686
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ..................461
Shoulder Belts ............................51
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................130
Signals, Turn...................112,166, 350, 658
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................522
Snow Tires ..............................514
Spare Tire.....................515, 516, 517, 570
708 INDEX
Spark Plugs .............................668
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................668
Oil..................................668
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ........................181, 183
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ..................191
Cancel ...............................181
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............179, 184
Starting..............................28, 455
Cold Weather ..........................456
Engine Fails To Start .....................457
Remote ...............................28
Starting And Operating .....................455
Starting Procedures ........................455
Steering
Column Controls .......................166
Column Lock ..........................177
Tilt Column ...........................177
Wheel, Heated .........................178
Wheel, Tilt ............................177
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............401
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .401
Storage ................................652
Storage, Vehicle .......................424, 652
Storing Your Vehicle .......................652
Stuck, Freeing............................587
Sunglasses Storage ........................278
Sun Roof ............................289, 293
Sun Visor Extension .......................133
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........62
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................609
System, Remote Starting .....................28
Telescoping Steering Column .................177
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........422
Tilt Steering Column .......................177
Time Delay, Headlight ......................162
10
INDEX 709
Tip Start................................456
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......504, 505
Tire Markings ............................497
Tires.....................112,509, 515, 516, 687
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................519
Air Pressure ...........................509
Chains ...............................522
Changing .............................569
Compact Spare .........................516
General Information ...............509, 515, 516
High Speed ...........................512
Inflation Pressures .......................511
Jacking ...........................569, 572
Life Of Tires ...........................519
Load Capacity ......................504, 506
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....361, 374, 524
Pressure Warning Light ...................341
Quality Grading ........................687
Radial ...............................513
Replacement ...........................520
Rotation ..............................523
Safety ............................497, 509
Sizes ................................498
Snow Tires ............................514
Spare Tire ...................515, 516, 517, 570
Spinning .............................518
Tread Wear Indicators ....................518
Tire Safety Information .....................497
Tire Service Kit........................558, 561
To Open Hood ...........................159
Towing ................................548
Disabled Vehicle ........................592
Recreational ...........................549
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........549
Traction .............................472,
473
Traction Control ..........................490
Trailer Towing ...........................548
Transaxle ...............................459
710 INDEX
Automatic ............................459
Autostick .............................469
Operation .............................459
Transmission ............................461
Automatic .........................461, 627
Maintenance ...........................627
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....279
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........23
Transporting Pets .........................107
Tread Wear Indicators ......................518
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .....................46, 47
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................47
Trunk Release Remote Control .................46
Turn Signals ......................166, 350, 658
Uconnect
Operation .............................400
Uconnect Settings .....................24, 25
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................449
Do Not Disturb ........................448
Siri Eyes Free ..........................447
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................441
Uconnect Settings .......................24, 35
Uconnect Voice Command ...................428
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................687
Universal Transmitter ......................279
Unleaded Gasoline ........................534
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................56
Vanity Mirrors ...........................133
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading .......................506, 546
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage........................424, 652
10
INDEX 711
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................608
Voice Recognition System (VR)................428
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................555
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................685
Washers, Windshield....................172, 616
Washing Vehicle ..........................630
Water
Driving Through ........................473
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................632
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................632
Wind Buffeting .....................45, 292, 297
Window Fogging .........................425
Windows ................................42
Auto Down ............................43
Driver/Passenger Window Controls ...........42
Express Up And Down ....................44
Power ................................42
Power Windows .........................42
Rear Passenger Window Controls .............42
Reset Auto-Up ..........................45
Wind Buffeting ..........................45
Window Controls ........................42
Window Lockout ........................45
Windshield Defroster .......................111
Windshield Washers ....................172, 616
Fluid ................................616
Windshield Wiper Blades....................616
Windshield Wipers ........................172
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................616
Wipers, Intermittent .......................173
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................176
Wrecker Towing ..........................592
712 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
200
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016 200
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
16UF-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Fourth Edition
